Chrysler SRT8 2012 Owner`s manual

2012 Grand Cherokee
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
12WK741-126-AA
907713 Jeep Cherokee OM cover.indd 1
2012
First Edition
Grand Cherokee
SRT8
Printed in U.S.A.
3/10/11 1:09 PM
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 7
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it not.
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
INTRODUCTION
5
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
injury. Drive carefully.
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label
Consult the following table for a description of the
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the this Owner’s Manual:
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
1
6
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield and is stamped into the right front body,
behind the right front seat. Move the right front seat
forward to allow better viewing of the stamped VIN. The
VIN is also located on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle.
Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle
identification number and optional equipment.
7
1
VIN Location
8
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 25
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
䡵 Liftgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . 51
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 55
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 56
䡵 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 57
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
11
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . 59
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 91
▫ Seat Belt Lock Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 64
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 67
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 70
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of
which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the detented ON/RUN position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And NOTE: With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, the ElecOperating” for further information.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display the
ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
13
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle on
the driver’s side should the battery in the vehicle or the
RKE transmitter go dead. The emergency key is also for
locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
the theft alarm armed, will result in the alarm sounding.
Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is dead)
into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm.
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
then pull the key out with your other hand.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
• If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the
shift lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch. If this occurs, place the shift
lever in PARK, rotate the key to the right slightly, then
remove the Key Fob as described. If a malfunction
Emergency Key Removal
occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition
switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperNOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
able. The engine can be started and stopped, but the
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Key Fob cannot be removed until you obtain service.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
CAUTION!
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in
this condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob
or ignition module. Only remove the emergency
key for locking and unlocking the doors.
(Continued)
15
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, opening the driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed in
ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped) will cause the reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
17
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
The system uses the factory-mated Key Fob with Remote Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition possible by an authorized dealer.
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
CAUTION!
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatsystem will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN posi- problems and loss of security protection.
tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
is one that has never been programmed.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
CAUTION!
the authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• With Keyless Enter-N-Go, always remember to
place the ignition in OFF.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided subject to the following conditions:
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is • This device may not cause harmful interference.
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
19
• This device must accept any interference that may be Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
received, including interference that may cause unde- one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
sired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, liftgate flipper glass, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior
switches for door locks, power liftgate and flipper glass
are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both
audio and visual signals, the horn will sound, the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turn signals will
flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance is
still present (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors,
ignition) after three minutes, the headlights, park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, make
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ- sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
ent. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, To Disarm The System
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
vehicle:
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further infor• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
mation).
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn
the key to the ON position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
21
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
door the alarm will sound.
Tamper Alert
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- ILLUMINATED ENTRY
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob
with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
NOTE:
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courat speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
RKE transmitters.
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
23
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Remote Unlock Sequence
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors, on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Key Fob With Five-Button RKE Transmitter
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE
transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry
feature. The horn chirp feature can be turned on or off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights turn on, the park lamps will flash, the horn
will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you turn the
ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lamps
and horn will remain on.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
25
Emergency Key Removal
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of
the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
Separating RKE Transmitter
Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
27
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
halves together.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
following conditions:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• This device must accept any interference received,
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
including interference that may cause undesired
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveoperation.
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly apapproximately
300 ft (91 m).
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
may reduce this range.
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
All of the following conditions must be met before the
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
engine will remote start:
• Ignition in Off position for Keyless Enter-N-Go vehicle
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
WARNING!
• Hood closed
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Liftgate/Flipper Glass closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
29
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
on the RKE transmitter twice within five secvehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start premaonds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
turely:
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
cycle.
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless EnterVehicle
N-Go feature, the ignition switch must be in the
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
Insert Key and Turn To Run” will display in the EVIC
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
until you insert the key. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle • For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
the START button.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
31
Manual Door Lock Knob
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
33
If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
the ignition switch and the driver’s door is open, the If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
doors will not lock.
stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to “Electronic
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
Doors
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
35
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the NOTE:
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”
down the window, and open the door using the outside
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
door handle.
information.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the • If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for
72 hours, the Passive Entry feature for the handle may
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
time out. Pulling the deactivated front door handle
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
will reactivate the door handle’s Passive Entry feature.
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
present in the ignition.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
37
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the button on the right side of
the chrome accent bar, which is located on the liftgate
below the flipper glass to lock or unlock the vehicle.
Liftgate Passive Entry Button
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the button
on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is
programmed in EVIC, the liftgate and Flipper glass will
unlock when you press the button on the liftgate For
further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on
the outside of the handles.
Outside Door Handle Lock Button
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
39
passenger and rear passenger door windows. The winNOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you dow controls will operate only when the ignition switch
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s The power window switches remain active for up to
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
passenger door and rear doors which operate the front Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch or leave a vehicle with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
The power window switches remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road condiTo open the window part way, press to the first detent
tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
and release it when you want the window to stop.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
41
during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to Window Lockout Button
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually. The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
WARNING!
disable the window controls on the rear doors, press the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
press the Window Lockout button again.
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle and lift.
Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger
or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate.
Liftgate Release
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Liftgate Flipper Glass
The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the
liftgate is unlocked. To open the flipper glass, push up on
the window switch located on the liftgate.
43
Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened, connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted, preventing
activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass
is open.
NOTE: The liftgate flipper glass will not open if the NOTE: If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should
liftgate is ajar.
occur, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to
open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can
be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the
liftgate trim panel.
WARNING!
Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
Liftgate Glass Release
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pulling
up on the liftgate handle or by pressing the
LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. Press the LIFTGATE button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds, to open
the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pressing the
button twice within five seconds a second time will close
the liftgate.
To operate the power liftgate manually in the open
direction, pull the liftgate handle once to initiate a power
cycle and then pull the handle a second time to put
liftgate into manual mode.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC) and the liftgate
chime will be audible. For further information, refer to
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by ⬙Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)/
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)⬙ in ⬙Underoverhead console, or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE standing Your Instrument Panel⬙.
button located on left rear trim, near the liftgate opening.
NOTE: In the event of a power malfunction to the
Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim
liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to
once will close the liftgate only, this button cannot be
open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can
used to open the liftgate.
be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the
liftgate trim panel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
45
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
• The power liftgate will not operate if the liftgate
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
flipper glass is open.
rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
liftgate opening to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
open, press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully
(0 km/h).
open the liftgate, and then press it again to close.
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
below ⫺22°F (⫺30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
position.
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate switches.
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
manual operation.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a
detection of an obstruction.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
47
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
• Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
Some of the most important safety features in your
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
vehicle are the restraint systems:
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
energy during an impact event
all passengers
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenAutomatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
ger
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
item in a seat — if equipped
restraint)
Please pay close attention to the information in this
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
window
possible.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
wheel
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
infant and child restraint systems. For more information Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
CHildren (LATCH).
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
severity and type of collision.
their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
buckled up in a rear seat.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
49
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
51
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat. 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Latch Plate to Buckle
Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
53
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too will withdraw any slack in the belt.
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
55
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to shoulder belt.
allow it to retract fully.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that fits you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
button, verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by
pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it
is locked into position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
First Row
Second Row
Third Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
N/A
Center
N/A
ALR
N/A
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
Passenger
ALR
ALR
N/A
57
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is Energy Management Feature
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking collision.
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
locking mode.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
59
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
worn snugly and positioned properly.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
certain types of rear impacts.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo- NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on several
factors, including the severity and type of the impact.
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front
Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
61
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
2
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
AHR In Reset Position
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock NOTE:
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
into the back decorative plastic half.
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
63
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deacOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
tivating BeltAlert威.
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is BeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened.
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
Seat Belt Lock Out
The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that long enough. When it is not required, remove the exwill not allow you to extract the center webbing unless tender and store it.
the rear seat upper latch is engaged.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
the force if there is a collision.
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
Seat Belt Extender
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
65
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags, are located above the side windows and their
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced • Steering Wheel and Column
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
• Instrument Panel
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
• Knee Impact Bolster
the outboard side of the front seats.
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
67
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
69
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bags and SABIC air bags during impacts that require
side air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions.
(Continued)
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the bags, SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as
driver and the front passenger, and position front occu- required, depending on the severity and type of impact.
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
71
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all away from an inflating air bag.
frontal collisions, including some that may produce subThe ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collithe air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruDriver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
Inflator Units
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnosThe Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
73
based on several factors, including the severity and type
of collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of
the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of
non-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and the door.
The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side
air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children.
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
(SABIC) Inflator Units
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
Inflator Units
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are dedeploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
signed to activate only in certain side collisions.
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
air bags to inflate, based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about onequarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, front and side impact sensors
can aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to certain impact events.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the followBecause air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, ing functions:
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
until the ignition key is turned off.
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
75
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
If A Deployment Occurs
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
immediately after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the air bag system.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
structions for cleaning.
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have defront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
bags will not be in place to protect you.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
2
76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
77
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
2
78
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
79
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip- for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
ment, can read the information if they have access to the child.
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and all Canadian provinces, require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or under should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants And Child Restraints
There are different sizes and types of restraints for Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardchildren from newborn size to the child almost large facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
2
80
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
WARNING!
• Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
air bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
will use it before you buy it.
81
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then,
pull the shoulder belt until it is fully extended from the
retractor. Allow the belt to return into the retractor,
pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. For additional
information, refer to ⬙Automatic Locking Retractors
Mode⬙ earlier in the Occupant Restraints Section of the
owners’ manual.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• The second row seating positions are equipped with
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR). To install child
restraint seats pull the belt from the retractor until
there is enough allowance to pass it through the child
WARNING!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
2
82
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
Older Children And Child Restraints
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and Children Too Large For Booster Seats
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc- Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
tion are for children who are over two years old or who comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of over the front of the seat when their back is against the
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held • The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower An- • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
chors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
slouching can move the belt out of position.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
the back.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
83
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played
with, and never leave your child unattended in the
vehicle.
2
84
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The rear outboard seating positions have lower
anchorages capable of accommodating LATCHcompatible child seats having flexible,
webbing-mounted lower attachments and child
seats with fixed lower attachments. The rear seat lower
anchors can be readily identified by the symbol located on
the seatback directly above the anchorages and are just
visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces. The vehicle’s seat belt must be used for the
center position. Regardless of the specific type of lower
attachment, never install LATCH-compatible child seats
such that two seats share a common lower anchorage.
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCHcompatible, you can only install the child restraints using
the vehicle’s seat belts. For typical installation instructions, refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint System”.
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,
If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
seat cushion surfaces.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
85
2
Latch Anchorages
In addition, there are top tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear
seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat
back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor
Panel To Access Top Tether Strap
86
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
WARNING!
Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load
floor. Improper usage of the tether can lead to a
failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
First, loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach
the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material.
Then, locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat
where you are placing the child restraint and attach the
tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the
tether strap to provide the most direct path between the
anchor and the child restraint. There are three top tether
anchorages located on the back of the seat, behind the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
gap panel. They are not visible until you fold the gap
panel down. Do not use the cargo tie down hooks
located on the floor behind the seat. Finally, tighten all
three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
87
secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of
seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a
ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the
retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to
“Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Seat
Belts in Passenger Seating Positions” section. The chart
below defines the seating positions with an Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR).
First Row
Second Row
Third Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
N/A
Center
N/A
ALR
N/A
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
• N/A — Not Applicable
Belts
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to
Passenger
ALR
ALR
N/A
2
88
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the upward position. To access the center seat arm rest
tether first lower the arm rest. The tether is located behind
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat backing, then raise the armrest and attach the tether hook
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in to the strap located on the front of the arm rest.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
89
strap anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted
floor panel away from the seat back, this will expose the
top tether strap anchorages.
2
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
For center seating position route the tether strap over the
seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether
anchor located on the back of the seat. For the outboard
seating positions, route the tether under the head restraints, and attach the hook to the top tether anchor
located on the back of the seat. To access the top tether
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor
Panel To Access Top Tether Strap
90
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
Top Tether Strap Mounting
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load
floor. Improper usage of the tether can lead to a
failure of an infant or child restraint. The child
could be badly injured or killed.
Top Tether Strap Attachment
For the center seating position route the tether strap over
the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the top
tether anchorage located on the back of the seat behind
the gap panel. For the outboard seating positions, route
the tether strap under the headrests and attach the hook
to the top tether anchorage located on the back of the seat
91
behind the gap panel. Please note the top tether anchorages are not visible until you fold the gap panel down.
Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the
floor behind the seats.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 500 miles (800 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
2
92
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
SAFETY TIPS
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant Transporting Passengers
installed at the factory is high-quality and energy- NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be AREA.
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
93
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
(Continued)
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
2
94
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
95
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
2
96
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
䡵 Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped . . . . . . . 107
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 133
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Reclining Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 175
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . 175
▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 177
▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID
Headlights Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . 178
99
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Ambient Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Windshield Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 䡵 Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 187
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
䡵 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
. . 195
. . 197
. . 198
. . 199
. . . . . . 190
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . 204
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
101
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . 207
▫ Cleaning The Parksense威 System . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . 208
▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 229
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . 212
䡵 Parkview威 Rear Back Up Camera — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped . . 218
䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 223
▫ Parksense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Parksense威 Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Parksense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Enabling And Disabling Parksense威 . . . . . . . 227
▫ Service The Parksense威 Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 234
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Sunglass Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . 241
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 䡵 Commandview威 Sunroof With Power Shade
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode .
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
—
. . . 248
. . . 249
. . . 249
. . . 249
. . . 250
. . . 250
. . . 250
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
103
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . 250
▫ Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Retractable Cargo Area
Cover — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 270
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The mirror is twisted on the
windshield button counterclockwise and requires no
tools for mounting.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
105
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and
normal.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped
The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Outside Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
107
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarautomatically.
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Extension
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.
Rear Detection Zones
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will • The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode
or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
when the vehicle is in PARK.
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap- The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the contamination so that the BSM system can function
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi- properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
mately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumdriver of vehicles in these areas.
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
3
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
Warning Light Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
3
Overtaking/Passing
Overtaking/Approaching
111
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Opposing Traffic
Stationary Objects
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
113
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
3
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
Blind Spot Alert
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
WARNING!
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
the radio volume is reduced.
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back- When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime, the
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn
death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio volume (if on) will also be
reduced.
115
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
NOTE:
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
Astronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable
system, the radio volume is reduced.
When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will
the appropriate visual alert only.
display the message “ Blind spot system unavailableAstronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is re- Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
quested, the radio volume is also reduced. Turn/ Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, inhazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone alrequests the chime.
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
websites:
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
English, Spanish, or French languages.
• or call 1–877–855–8400
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
117
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if details.
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehibutton and Voice Com(Uconnect™ Phone
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
mand
button) that will enable you to
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
access the system. When you press the button you will
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
switch), if so equipped.
is your signal to give a command.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
3
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
example, you can use the compound form voice
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
the compound form command into two voice commands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for Voice Command Tree
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or an- Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
other prompt.
Help Command
• For certain operations, compound commands can be If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
119
Cancel Command
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
and follow the audible prompts.
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identifew instances the system will take you back to the
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
previous menu.
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
after the initial pairing process.
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile
To complete the pairing process, you will need to referphone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
given a unique phone name.
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
pairing instructions:
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
• Press the
button to begin.
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
“Device Pairing”.
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the • The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
of certain radios.
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
Call By Saying A Name
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
button to begin.
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to • Press the
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Dial By Saying A Number
“Call”.
• Press the
button to begin.
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial”.
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previwant to call.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
121
• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
may appear in the display of certain radios.
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired.
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
phonebook entry that you are adding.
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone• Press the
button to begin.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
“Phonebook New Entry”.
main menu.
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob”.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downTransfer From Mobile Phone
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availUconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availnames) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
able for use.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
phone is accessible.
website for supported phones.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
• To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonedownloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
book.
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
123
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
NOTE:
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
to the main menu.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
deleted or edited.
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
• Press the
button to begin.
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Entry” feature.
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
• Press the
button to begin.
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
phonebook entry that you are editing.
“Phonebook Delete”.
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
button while the
from the list, press the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete”.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, • Note that only the phonebook in the current language
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
is deleted.
wish to delete.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
deleted or edited.
language is deleted.
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
button to begin.
• Press the
deleted or edited.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
125
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
“Phonebook List Names”.
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phoneplan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
book entries, if available.
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
your mobile service provider for the features that you
button during the playing of the desired name, and have.
say “Call”.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
operations at this point.
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
number designation you wish to call.
button to accept the call. To reject the
call. Press the
• The selected number will be dialed.
call, press and hold the
button until you hear a single
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the button until you hear a single beep.
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
Toggling Between Calls
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
button until you hear a single beep,
press the
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
To make a second call while you are currently on a call, time.
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
127
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
Three-Way Calling
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current Redial
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
button to begin.
• Press the
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.
one conference call.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
English, Espanol, or Francais.
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
the language selection.
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain duraAfter selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
voice commands will be in that language.
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonemobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
book is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and is usable across all languages.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
129
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency • If supported, this number may be programmable on
button and say
number for your area.
some systems. To do this, press the
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as • The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
follows:
for the mobile phone directly.
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect™ System,
• and have network coverage.
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
• Press the
button to begin.
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
“Towing Assistance”.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
NOTE:
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the with Automated Systems”.
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528Working With Automated Systems
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14This method is used in instances where one generally has
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
navigating through an automated telephone system.
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
Towing Assistance references.
service or automated customer service line. Some ser• If supported, this number may be programmable on
vices require immediate response selection. In some
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
“Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Uconnect™ Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying
press the
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and say, “Send.” The
call and then press the
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
131
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
• Press the
button to begin.
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
one of the following:
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
Phone And Network Status Indicators
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situaIf available on the radio and/or on a premium display tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by that the call did not go through even though the call is in
your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
notification to inform you of your phone and network audio.
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
133
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
button
and say “Transfer Call”.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
button to begin.
• Press the
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
3
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, say “List Phones”.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
priority phone present in or near (approximately
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
button and
phone being announced, press the
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sec- Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
button to begin.
• Press the
paired phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Select Another Mobile Phone
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
This feature allows you to select and start using another
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
prompts.
• Press the
button to begin.
• You can also press the
button at any time while the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
wish to delete.
• You can also press the
button at any time while the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
135
You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogThis procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce- Reset
dures:
button.
• press the
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
radio mode):
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
• Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
the session begins, or,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
• Press the
button and say the “Voice Training, prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Command
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would • When navigating through an automated system such
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
you.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
during a Voice Command period.
not in motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
137
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Even though international dialing for most number
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
number combinations may not be supported.
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
compromised with the convertible top down.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Far End Audio Performance
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
• Audio quality is maximized under:
compromised with the convertible top down.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.
3
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Send Messages:
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
a new message:
your phone.
• Press the
button.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
If you wish to hear the new message:
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
• Press the
button.
button while the
To send a message, press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or
• Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect™ Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List of Preset Messages:
11. See You in 15 minutes
1. Yes
12. I am on my way
2. No
13. I’ll be late
3. Where are you?
14. Are you there yet?
4. I need more direction.
15. Where are we meeting?
5. L O L
16. Can this wait?
6. Why
17. Bye for now
7. I love you
18. When can we meet
8. Call me
19. Send number to call
9. Call me later
20. Start without me
10. Thanks
139
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
• Press the
button.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Power-Up
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
will then be given a choice to change it.
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
141
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
143
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Primary
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
145
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
3
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
button, you
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
147
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists The system will best recognize your speech if the winbutton, listen dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
options, press the Voice Command
set to low.
for the beep, and say your command.
button while the
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Combutton and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
Commands
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
The Voice Command system understands two types of
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
commands. Universal commands are available at all
These commands are universal and can be used from any times. Local commands are available if the supported
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon radio mode is active.
the active application.
Changing the Volume
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
a normal speaking volume.
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Radio AM
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for this mode, you may say the following commands:
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
Main Menu
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
menu.
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
Radio FM
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Setup” (to switch to system setup)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
149
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
mands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
Memo
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)
3
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Switch to system setup”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Change to setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Main menu setup” or
— During the playback you may press the Voice
• “Switch to setup”
button to stop playing memos. You
Command
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Language English”
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Language French”
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
• “Language Spanish”
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Tutorial”
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “Voice Training”
Setup
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the Command
button first and wait for the beep before
following:
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
• “Change to setup”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
151
Voice Training
SEATS
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™ vehicle.
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
and the seatback.
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
153
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
backward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
WARNING! (Continued)
Passenger’s Power Seat
Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas(Continued) senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
3
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when you have reached the desired position.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
155
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
raise and lower the position of the support.
3
Power Lumbar Switch
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with manual front driver
or passenger seats. The seats can be adjusted forward or
rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Adjustment Bar
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Recline Lever
157
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks.
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
WARNING!
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
159
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel can be
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to
“Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informawithin two to five minutes.
tion.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
Front Heated Seats
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
controls for each heater are located near the bottom
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
center of the instrument panel (below the climate conmaximum of 50 minutes of continuous operation. At that
trols).
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
3
160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that
allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
maximum of 50 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
in higher ambient temperatures.
There are two ventilated seat switches that allow the
driver and passenger to operate the seats independently.
The ventilated seat switches are located on the switch
bank in the center stack of the instrument panel, just
below the climate controls.
161
The ventilated seat switches are used
to control the speed of the fans located
in the seat. Press the switch once to
choose HIGH, press it a second time to
choose LOW. Pressing the switch a
third time will turn the ventilated seat
OFF. When HIGH speed is selected
both lights on the switch will be illuminated. When LOW
speed is selected one light will be illuminated.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
3
162
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
163
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
3
164
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard headrests
are not removable.
165
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
3
Rear Head Restraint
166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Rear Seat Release
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating NOTE:
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left
room.
outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to • Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right
outboard seat belt buckled.
fold down easily.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
Rear Seat Folded
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
167
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
3
168
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the
driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat,
driver’s outside mirror, adjustable steering wheel position (if equipped), and the radio station preset settings.
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also
be programmed to recall the same positions when the
UNLOCK button is pressed.
Rear Seat Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
169
Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory
NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered
button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store a new one.
1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
the ON/RUN position.
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system
Driver Memory Buttons
to complete the memory recall before continuing to
Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One
Step 3.
or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory
position. The memory system can accommodate up to 3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sideview
four RKE transmitters, each one linked to either of the mirror to the desired positions.
two memory positions.
4. Adjust the power steering column tilt and telescoping
position (if equipped) to the desired positions.
3
170
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up 11. Select ⬙Remote Linked to Memory⬙ in the Electronic
to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter ⬙Yes⬙. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
and remove the key.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory
driver’s door.
position, using the other numbered memory button, or to
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY link another RKE transmitter to memory.
button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
Memory Position Recall
performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
transmitters.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
the ON/RUN position.
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
171
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press 3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located
MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door, or the on the driver’s door.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
memory position 2.
button 1 on the driver’s door.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
MEMORY buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S,
button on the RKE transmitter.
1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
driver’s mirror and the pedals stop moving. A delay of To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
one second will occur before another recall can be memory position, repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE
transmitter.
selected.
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
remove the key.
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
2. Press and release MEMORY button number 1. The Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
system will recall any memory settings stored in position
1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall
before continuing to Step 3.
To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory
3
172
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
vehicle.
driving position when the key is placed into the
ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward
the ACC/ON position.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically disThere are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in
(23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there
available:
is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
• The seat cushion will move rearward approximately
Exit/Entry.
2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is
greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
rear seat stop when the key is removed from the Entry/Exit position.
ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
• The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/ further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
173
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
3
Safety Latch Location
CAUTION!
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left
and lift the hood.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
174
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
175
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
solution followed by rinsing.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
3
176
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle speFeatures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers And Washers” in this
section for further information.
NOTE: If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is
replaced, the SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
To Activate
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerNOTE: When your headlights come on during the
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrudaytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically
ment Panel” for further information.
dim to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Lights” in
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
this section for further information.
position.
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward 3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
lighting at night by automating high beam control front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
177
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
parking brake is engaged. Also, the Daytime Running
To Deactivate
Lights will turn off automatically when a turn signal is in
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal opera- operating. The headlight switch must be used for normal
nighttime driving.
tion of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only
reactivate the system.
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll box,
etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause the Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
system to function improperly.
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
3
178
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To
Fog Light Operation
turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
The
fog
lights
will
operate only when the parking lights
back to the O (Off) position.
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
switch to the parking light or headlight position and turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
179
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating headlights are required during the day.
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to the its farthest upward position, or if equipped, when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the
interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the
way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior
lights to go out. This is also known as the “Party” mode
because it allows the doors to stay open for extended
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
Dimmer Control
3
180
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lights-On Reminder
Front Map/Reading Lights
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overafter the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
head console.
the driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way
up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed.
Ambient Light
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility of the floor center console and PRNDL area.
3
Ambient Light
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
181
182
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
steering column.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Multifunction Lever
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
183
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the
lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
3
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
184
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
185
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
3
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the cycles, then turn off.
186
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Mist Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
187
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windautomatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
shield.
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
• Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
• A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
to activate this feature.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
Sensing feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandtive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 can be used if the driver The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
OFF position when not using the system.
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
3
188
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
steering column.
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
189
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
3
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
190
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door
trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
191
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
3
192
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
right side of the steering wheel.
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
193
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inspeed and on level ground before pressing the SET crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
button.
increase until the button is released, then the new set
To Deactivate
speed will be established.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without (1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
3
194
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
195
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
(Continued)
3
196
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ACC system:
− Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
− Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions.
− Does not predict the lane curvature or the movement of preceding vehicles and will not compensate for such changes.
− Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or
missing distance warnings.
− Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the
vehicle’s braking capability, and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations
(i.e., in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
197
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”
in this section.
3
NOTE: The system will not react to preceding vehicles.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
DISTANCE SETTING
RES +
SET CANCEL
ON/OFF
MODE
198
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise conditions:
Control.
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When you apply the brakes.
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
• When the parking brake is set.
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
• When pushing the RES + button without a previously
set speed in memory.
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
199
To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
3
200
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set speed. If this occurs:
speed.
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
ACC Set
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
201
To Cancel
The system will disable ACC without erasing the
memory if:
• You softly tap the brake pedal.
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• If the transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
Driver Override
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
3
202
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off, • You turn OFF the ignition.
ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume Speed
Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
last set speed.
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of
20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• You push the ON/OFF button.
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary The Speed Setting
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pressing and holding the RES + button. If the button is
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is
released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC
display.
203
Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
NOTE:
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
• The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pressing and holding the SET - button. If the button is
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to dehill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
crease in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downEVIC display.
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
3
204
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
Distance Setting 2
Distance Setting 3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
205
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
Distance Setting 1
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
To change the distance setting, press the Distance button • The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
(24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages
setting adjusts between long, medium, and short.
itself.
• The distance setting is changed.
3
206
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on The ACC Systems provides Overtake Aid when passing
ACC Activation).
on the left hand side only. When driving with ACC
engaged and following a Target vehicle, the system will
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; howprovide an additional acceleration based on your current
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
speed. The acceleration is triggered by indicating a left
necessary.
turn signal.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead.
Brake Alert
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
207
ACC SET
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
− When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
The set speed will continue to display in place of the
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
while ACC is set.
Press the MENU button (located on the steering wheel) repeatedly until one of the following displays in the EVIC:
Menu
Button
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
− When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
− When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Example Only
3
208
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC Display Warnings And Maintenance
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
• Set Speed Change
The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
• Distance Setting Change
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
• System Cancel
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
• Driver Override
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the
• System Off
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.
• ACC Proximity Warning
The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message
• ACC Unavailable Warning
can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
The EVIC will return to the last display selected reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
209
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Clean Radar Sensor Warning
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise • If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your
Control is still available. For additional information refer
authorized dealer for service.
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
3
210
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, Removing ACC Sensor For Off-Roading
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
NOTE: When off-roading, it may be advisable to reDoing so could cause an ACC system failure or
move the ACC sensor. The sensor is located behind the
malfunction.
front lower grille in the center of the vehicle. After
When the condition that deactivated the system is no removing the lower fascia, you may remove the lower
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive sensor and bracket assembly.
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
To remove the sensor follow these instructions:
simply reactivating it.
1. Unplug the connector by depressing the two tabs on
NOTE:
the connector and pulling it out. Do not pull by the
• If the “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
wiring or use any tools to remove the connector.
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other 2. Remove the wiring christmas tree attachment from the
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your back of the bracket.
authorized dealer.
3. Remove the two M6 fasteners that connect the bracket
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after- to the bumper.
market grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
211
NOTE: Do not change the adjustment fasteners or pull To reinstall the sensor and bracket assembly reverse the
the sensor off of the bracket. Doing so may misalign the process above. The fastener torque required to assembly
sensor.
the bracket back to the beam is 6.6 ft lbs (9 Nm).
Store the sensor and bracket assembly in a safe location. ACC Unavailable Warning
The wiring and connector must be stowed properly after If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
the sensor and bracket assembly is removed.
temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
A connector plug is stowed on top of the bumper beam.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
Insert the wiring connector into the connector plug.
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
NOTE: When the sensor is removed, Adaptive Cruise occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
Control, Normal Cruise Control, and Forward Collision cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Warning will not be available. The cluster will display the
warning “ACC/FCW Unavailable - Service Radar Sensor.”
3
212
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service ACC Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
ACC/FCW Unavailable Warning
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Adding A Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACC
performance does not return to normal after removing
the trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle
may move in and out of the line of travel, which can
cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
213
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
convenience reasons, with no target vehicle detected.
Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will
resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal
ACC system functionality.
3
214
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
Lane Changing
ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC will not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There will not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
215
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
3
216
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
Classification Specifications:
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
47 C.F.R. Part 15
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
47
C.F.R Part 15.515
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To change between the different cruise modes, press the
MODE button when the system is in either the OFF,
READY or SET state. Pressing of the MODE button in any
state will result in changing to the new Mode in the OFF
state.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
217
To Vary The Speed Setting
There are two ways to change the set speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the
desired speed and press the SET - button.
• Tap the RES + or SET - button to increase or decrease
the set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments respectively. Hold the RES + or SET - button for 5 mph
(8 km/h) increments.
To Cancel
The system will disable normal Cruise Control without
erasing the memory if:
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the • You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
• You press the CANCEL button.
speed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control SysNOTE: You must observe the display when setting or
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
changing speed, not the speedometer.
3
218
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume
Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set
speed.
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) warns the driver of a
potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and
prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the
collision.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
memory if:
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end
• You push the ON/OFF button.
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end
• You turn off the ignition.
collision is probable a warning message (both audible
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of
If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated, you is no longer probable, the warning message will be
the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or deactivated.
Normal Cruise Control).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
219
guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
FCW Message
Changing FCW Status
NOTE:
The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 10 mph
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) refer
(16 km/h).
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
• When entering or driving in a curve, the FCW alerts “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inmay be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as formation. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will be
displayed in the EVIC.
3
220
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FCW settings can only be changed when the vehicle is in
PARK.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time.
Example Only
Example Only
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
221
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
3
FCW Off Example
Example Only
NOTE: In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed
in the EVIC.
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
222
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher
rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the unavailable screens.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
FCW Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
ACC/FCW Unavailable Warning
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense威 System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
223
ParkSense姞 Sensors
The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense姞 Warning Display
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Prochanged to the ON/RUN position.
grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customerposition, the system will remain active until the vehicle
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Inspeed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
strument Panel” for further information.
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
3
224
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense威 Warning Display is located in the Instru- ParkSense姞 Display
ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the will turn ON indicating the system status.
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Park Assist System ON
ParkSense威 Warning Display
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
225
3
Park Assist System OFF
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
226
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Display Message
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Arcs
Park Assist
System ON
None
Radio Mute
No
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
Warning Object
Warning Object
Detected
Detected
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense威 will MUTE the radio, if on, when
the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense姞
ParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled with a switch
located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or
through the Customer-Programmable Features section of
the EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or
227
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
Warning Object
Detected
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes
Warning Object
Detected
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes
Sound and Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the ParkSense威 switch is pressed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to
3
228
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE.
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense威
will not operate.
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the
The ParkSense威 switch LED will be ON when Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure
ParkSense威 is disabled or defective. The ParkSense威 the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition.
switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.
If the message continues to appear see an authorized
Service The ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System
dealer.
When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System is malfunctioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damthe shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
age the sensors.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
229
• ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, • Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 system operatnot to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
ing properly.
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
• When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furtherbumper.
more, once you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
key.
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the EVIC will
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
the EVIC.
3
230
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense威
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense威.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
System, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
231
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView威 camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
3
232
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/ distances for each zone:
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
233
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威 camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.
3
234
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
the “enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
5. Press the “save” soft-key.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key and pressing the
“save” soft-key.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of
Opener (HomeLink威), power liftgate and power sunroof the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
switches may also be included, if equipped.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
235
Sunglass Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Front Map/Reading Lights
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
Sunglass Bin Door
3
236
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink威 channels. The HomeLink威 indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
237
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secuprogramming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not
rity Alarm is active.
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
before you begin programming.
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
238
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
239
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威 NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
ter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the fre- activates, programming is complete.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
On some garage door openers/devices there may be a To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is follow these steps:
in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3
240
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indithe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the frerelease the button.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programboth buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
to rapid.
steps.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
and observe the indicator light.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programbefore 1995.
ming is complete and the garage door/device
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
pressed.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
241
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
follow these steps:
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
door or gate motor.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
release the button.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remain- away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
ing steps.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigtrained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
3
242
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door follow these steps:
may open and close while you are programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
and observe the indicator light.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- release the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
pressed.
follow all remaining steps.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
Using HomeLink姞
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
To operate, press and release the programmed
NOT erase the channels.
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lightprogramming, plug it back in at this time.
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
243
Security
Troubleshooting Tips
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
in your vehicle.
are some of the most common solutions:
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
erased.
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
244
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
245
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
246
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
Pinch Protect Feature
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
247
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect
disabled.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain
Venting Sunroof — Express
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurPress and release the Vent button within one half second
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunshade Operation
Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
3
248
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switches remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has
been turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
COMMANDVIEW姞 SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView威 sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
CommandView威 Sunroof and Power Shade Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
249
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
3
250
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Opening Power Shade — Express
Press the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will open automatically
from any position. The shade will open fully and stop
automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During
Express Open operation, any movement of the shade
switch will stop the shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward to
full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially opened
condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward
again.
Closing Power Shade — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. The shade will close fully and stop automatically.
This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close
operation, any movement of the switch will stop the shade.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
again.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
the switch forward and release to Express Close.
251
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts rethe rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
sult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
disabled.
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Pinch Protect Override
Sunroof Maintenance
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two
the glass panel.
seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof
Ignition OFF Operation
to move toward the closed position.
The power sunroof switches can be programmed to
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after
pressed.
3
252
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Refer to “Elec- the outlets marked with a “battery” are connected ditronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer- rectly to the battery and powered at all times.
Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “UnderNOTE:
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
NOTE: Opening either front door will cancel this
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
feature.
discharge.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the • To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
sunroof is fully closed.
element must be used.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are marked as either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
253
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain
access to this power outlet.
3
Center Console Outlet
Front Power Outlet
254
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area.
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
Rear Power Outlet
NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched to
“battery” powered all the time by switching the power
outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
255
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter
Panel
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
3
256
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
257
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
The power inverter switch is located
on the switch bank below the Climate
Controls. To turn on the power outlet,
press the switch once. Press the switch
a second time to turn the power outlet
off.
NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pressed,
there will be a delay of approximately one second before
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
the inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indicaprotection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
tor of the AC power inverter indicates whether the
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
inverter is producing AC power.
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
Power Inverter
3
258
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
located in the center console.
Front Cupholder Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
259
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers STORAGE
located in the fold-down center armrest.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
3
Rear Cupholders
Glove Compartment
260
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
latch and lower the glove box door.
access.
Opened Glove Compartment
Door Panel Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
261
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
Center Console
The center console contains both an upper and a lower the small latch located on the lid.
storage area.
3
Storage Compartment Latches
Storage Compartment
262
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Lower Storage Compartment
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
263
3
Press And Release
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Three-Press Switch
264
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Storage Bins
There are four removable storage bins located in the rear
cargo area. There are two storage bins located on either
side of the cargo area.
Two additional storage bins are located under the load
floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor
and attach the tether hook (attached to the bottom of the
load floor) to the liftgate opening.
Rear Storage Bins
Tether Strap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
265
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
Lower Storage Bins
3
266
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Cover
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
267
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
(Continued)
3
268
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
located on the control lever. The control lever is located
on the left side of the steering column.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
269
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
first detent for intermittent operation and to the OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more will
activate the washer pump which will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held. Upon release
of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear
wiper operation. When this rotary control is in the OFF
position, rotating it downward will activate the rear
washer pump which will continue to operate as long as
the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked position.
If the liftgate flipper glass is open, the rear window
wiper/washer functionality is interrupted and the wiper
stops at that “park” position. When the liftgate flipper
glass is closed, the rear wiper will resume wiper/washer
functionality after five seconds.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the defroster automatically turns off after approximately
switch is released the pump will resume normal opera- 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
tion.
3
270
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
CAUTION!
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
the heating elements:
dealer can order and install MOPAR威 crossbars built
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on specifically for this roof rack system.
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
after soaking with warm water.
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra- exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight
turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the
MOPAR威 crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the
desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position,
retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into
position.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
in use, place the front and rear crossbars approximately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction
can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
• If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For
improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the
rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna.
• The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if
equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.
271
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do
not carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or some other protection
between the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
(Continued)
3
272
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 304
䡵 Instrument Cluster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 289
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Vehicle Info
(Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
4
274
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Turn Menu Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Tire PSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 326
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go Display —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 334
䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 335
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 345
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 345
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
275
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 350
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 350
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Single Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2
While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 . . . . 363
▫ Important Notes For Single Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Play A DVD Using The
Touch-Screen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
4
276
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Replacing The Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Replacing The Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Unwired威 Stereo Headphone Lifetime
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
䡵 Harman Kardon威 Logic7威 High Performance
Multichannel Surround Sound System With
Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
. . . . . . . 392
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
277
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Storage Bin
9 — ESC Button
10 — Ignition Switch
11 — Hood Release
12 — Fuel Door Release
13 — Headlight Switch
14 — Dimmer Control
278
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
279
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
(RPM x 1000).
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
2. Air Bag Warning Light
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
not require towing.
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an authoCAUTION!
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
Vehicle” for further information.
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
required.
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
4
280
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
ON/RUN.
4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when the ignition switch is turned to the
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Inthat caused the ESC activation.
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
281
9. Hill Descent Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
5. TOW/HAUL Indicator Light — If Equipped
The symbol indicates the status of the Hill
This light will illuminate when the TOW/
Decent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will
HAUL button has been selected. The TOW/
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
HAUL button is located in the center of the
be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
instrument panel (below the climate controls).
Low” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph
6. Turn Signal Indicator
(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attemptThe arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals
ing to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator lamp will
when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone will
flash on/off.
chime, and an EVIC message will appear if the turn
10. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
signals are left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Display/Odometer Display
7. High Beam Indicator
The odometer display shows the total distance the veIndicates that headlights are on high beam.
hicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
8. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
lights are on.
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
4
282
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center”.
11. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
283
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
284
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. Brake Warning Light
12. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This light monitors various brake functions,
This indicator will illuminate when the park
including brake fluid level and parking brake
lights or headlights are turned on.
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
13. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
285
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
sary.
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
286
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is 16. Speedometer
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. Indicates vehicle speed.
17. Sport Mode
15. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light will illuminate when the sport mode
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
or track mode is selected. These modes provide
performance based tuning with improved hanswitch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
dling and acceleration through an electronic
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
controlled damping system. This system reduces body
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
roll and pitch in many driving situations including
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
cornering, acceleration and braking.
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate 18. Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
287
23. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
19. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conthe ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
trol (ESC) is off.
20. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) White
Telltale Area
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable white
24. Vehicle Security Light
telltales. For further information, refer to “Electronic
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
21. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
Amber Telltale Area
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable amber light will also come on for about three seconds when the
caution telltales. For further information, refer to “Elec- ignition is first turned on.
tronic vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
25. Temperature Gauge
22. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Red
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperaTelltale Area
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable red tell- the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
tales. For further information, refer to “Electronic vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)”.
4
288
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
289
The EVIC consists of the following:
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
• System Status
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
instrument cluster.
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
4
290
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP button to scroll upwheel:
ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units,
System Setup, Vehicle Speed, Trip Info, Turn
Menu Off and sub-menus.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and submenus.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus, sub-menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu. Press and hold
the SELECT button for two seconds to reset
features.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
291
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warnBACK Button
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
previous menu or sub-menu.
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
message takes control of the main display area for five
Displays
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
and outside temperature are displayed.
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
messages are displayed.
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom- and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
eter line.
• Unstored Messages
The main display area will normally display the main This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
4
292
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle). the following messages:
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Key Left Vehicle
• Key Not Detected
• Sport Mode Active
• Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor• Five Second Unstored Messages
ing System” in “Starting And Operating”)
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five • Premium TPM System Graphic Display
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Ex• Service Keyless System (refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go,
amples of this message type are ⬙Memory System UnPassive Entry - if equipped)
available - Not in Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
• Service Park Assist System
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the • Park Assist System Blinded
middle, and red telltales on the left.
• Park Assist Disabled
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Keyfob Battery Low
• Liftglass Open
• Left front turn signal lamp out
• Right front turn signal lamp out
• Left rear turn signal lamp out
• Right rear turn signal lamp out
• Low Tire Pressure
• ESC System Off
• Service blind spot system
• Blind spot detection unavailable
• Blind spot system off
• Blind spot system unavailable sensor blocked
293
• Normal Cruise Ready — When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is turned off and Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode is available. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Adaptive Cruise Off — When the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system is turned off. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• ACC Ready — When the ACC system is activated.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the ACC
system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
equipped).
4
294
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ACC Cancelled — To disable the ACC system. Refer to • Brake — If the ACC system predicts that its maximum
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
distance, this message will flash and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
• Sensed Vehicle Indicator — The system detects a
braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immeslower moving vehicle in the same lane. Refer to
diately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
distance from the vehicle ahead. Refer to “Adaptive
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea• Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after
tures Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
setting the desired speed in the ACC system. Refer to • Clean Radar Sensor in the Front of Vehicle — If the
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
conditions. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
• Distance Set — After changing the desired following
equipped).
distance in the ACC system, this message will display
momentarily. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control • ACC/FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error — If the
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
ACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction
Vehicle” (if equipped).
that limits functionality. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
295
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor — If the • Ignition or Accessory On Lights On
ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault
• Turn signal on
that requires service from an authorized dealer. Refer
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understand- • Park assist on
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Warning object detected
• Cruise Off When Park Brake is On
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• ACC Cancelled Below Min. Speed.
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
• Coolant low
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Service air suspension system
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
• Oil change due
• Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Key in ignition
• Remote start active — Insert Key and Turn to Run
• Lights on
• Remote start active — Push Start Button
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Memory 1 profile set
• Ignition or Accessory On
• Memory 2 profile set
4
296
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Memory system unavailable — Not in Park
• Service Four Wheel Drive System
• Memory system unavailable — Seatbelt buckled
• ECO — Fuel Saver Indicator
• Memory 1 profile recall
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — AUTOMATIC
• Memory 2 profile recall
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — TOW
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — TRACK
• Wrong Key
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — SNOW
• Damaged Key
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — SPORT
• Key not programmed
• Sport Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required
• Function currently unavailable — Power Liftgate
• To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
Owners Manual
• Unlock to operate — Power Liftgate
• Put in Park to operate — Power Liftgate
• Automatic high beams on
• Automatic high beams off
• For 4x4 Low Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans in
N Press 4 Low
• For 4x4 High Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans
in N Press 4 Low
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
297
• Terrain System Settings Not Available
•
•
•
•
•
•
• Entry/Exit (Park) Height in Progress — This message
is displayed (for 5 seconds) when the request is made
Raising Vehicle Ride Height (with icon)
to go into Entry/Exit Height while the vehicle speed is
Lowering Vehicle Ride Height (with icon)
between 15 and 25 mph. This shows that the request
has been recognized and will lower to Entry/Exit
Normal Vehicle Ride Height — This message is disheight when vehicle is below 15 mph.
played (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has achieved
• Service Air Suspension System — This is displayed
the Normal Vehicle Ride Height.
when a fault has occurred in the system. The system
Off Road Ride Height Level 1 — This message is
will have limited operation at that point.
displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has
• Immediate Air Suspension Service/Repair Required
achieved the Off Road Height Level 1.
— This is displayed when a fault has occurred in the
Off Road Ride Height Level 2 — This message is
system which results in a complete system shutdown.
displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has
The system will be non operational at that point.
achieved the Off Road Height Level 2.
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height —
Vehicle Lowered To Entry/Exit (Park) Height — This
This message is displayed in advance warning to the
message is displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle
driver that the vehicle will be moved to the next lower
has achieved the Park Height.
preset position unless the speed is reduced.
4
298
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted — The vehicle EVIC White Telltale Lights
speed is too high to enter one of the preset levels This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell(Entry/Exit Level/Off Road Ride Height Level 1/Off tales. These telltales include:
Road Ride Height Level 2).
• Shift Lever Status
• Air Suspension System Cooling Down – Please Wait — The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed
This message is displayed if the compressor tempera- indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1”
ture level is too high. Level control is suspended until indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has
the compressor has cooled down.
been engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For
further information on ERS, refer to “Starting And Oper• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered – Door Open — This
ating”
message is displayed if a door or the liftgate is ajar and
• Electronic Speed Control ON
level control is suspended.
This light will turn on when the electronic
• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And
speed control is ON. For further information,
Tire Change
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under• Aerodynamic Ride Height — This is displayed (for
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
5 seconds) when the vehicle has achieved the Aerodynamic Height.
• Performance Features
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
299
• Electronic Speed Control SET
• Power Steering System Over Temperature — If
This light will turn on when the electronic
Equipped
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
speed control is SET. For further information,
TEMP” message and a icon are displayed on the
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “UnderEVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steering
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
maneuvers may have occurred, which caused
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
an over temperature condition in the power steering
This light will turn on when the ACC is ON.
system. You will lose power steering assistance momenFor further information, refer to “Adaptive
tarily until the over temperature condition no longer
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
let vehicle idle. After five minutes, the system will cool
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
and return to normal operation. Refer to “Power Steering”
This light will turn on when the ACC is SET. in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
NOTE:
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operaFeatures Of Your Vehicle.”
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
4
300
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for • Air Suspension Down
service.
The air suspension down telltale will illuminate when the air suspension is in use. For
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
further information, refer to “Starting And OpThis area will show reconfigurable amber caution tellerating”.
tales. These telltales include:
• Low Fuel Light
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
This light warns the driver of a potential colli(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the
fuel is added.
driver to take action in order to avoid the
collision. For further information, refer to • Loose Gascap Indicator
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
• Air Suspension Up
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten
The air suspension up telltale will illuminate
the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button
when the air suspension is in use. For further
to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the
information, refer to “Starting And Operating”.
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
301
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap EVIC Red Telltale Lights
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the wind- • Door Ajar
shield washer fluid is low.
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
• SERV 4WD
The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift • Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light stays on or
comes on during driving, it means that the
may be ajar.
4WD system is not functioning properly and
that service is required.
• Liftgate Flipper Glass Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
flipper glass may be ajar.
4
302
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
This light informs you of a problem with the
sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg- If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
ing system. If the light stays on or comes on while engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authosystem. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
rized dealer.
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
303
required. You may experience reduced performance, an service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may Do In Emergencies” for more information.
require towing.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive trans• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condimission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
light goes off.
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
4
304
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
305
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Do • Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
not start the engine.)
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times Trip Computer functions.
within 10 seconds.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. tion:
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode — If
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not Equipped
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
Fuel Economy
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
the SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN
reset.
buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy functions displays in the EVIC:
The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the
average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System
4
306
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four Distance To Empty (DTE)
cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner. Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
Fuel Saver Mode — On
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Speed
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the
current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
between mph or km/h.
307
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
Trip Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
Trip A
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
EVIC.
reset.
Trip Info
Trip B
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
Info” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
reset.
SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the following Trip functions displays in
the EVIC:
• Trip A
4
308
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to
clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
resettable functions, press and hold the SELECT button
for two seconds. The current display will reset along with
other functions.
Units
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Performance Features
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This light will illuminate when the sport mode
is selected. This mode provides performance
based tuning with improved handling through
an electronic controlled damping system. This
system reduces body roll and pitch in many driving
situations including cornering, acceleration and braking.
For further information, refer to ”Sport Mode” in “Starting And Operating”.
The Performance Features include the following:
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• Braking Distance
• 1/8 Mile
• 1/4 Mile
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force
309
• Digital Speedometer
To access, press and release either the UP or DOWN
arrow button until “Performance Features” appears in
the EVIC, then press and release the SELECT button.
Press the UP or DOWN button to cycle through the
features. Press the SELECT button to select a feature.
The following describes each feature and its operation:
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
10 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
4
310
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The time will continue to display until the SELECT • The distance and speed measurements display while
button is pressed.
the event is taking place.
• Pressing the SELECT button will clear the current run • The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
time and display the vehicle’s best 0-60 mph
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com(0-100 km/h) time.
plete stop.
• To clear the vehicle’s best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time, • The distance and speed measurements will continue to
press and hold the SELECT button for five seconds.
display until the SELECT button is pressed.
Braking Distance
• Pressing the SELECT button will clear the current run
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
and prepare the cluster to record a new run.
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
depressed.
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
• This feature will only function when applying the vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 30 seconds
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
and the vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile
(1/4 mile).
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
• The word “READY” will flash when conditions are
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condimet for the event to begin.
tions are met for the event to begin.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
311
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach Peak G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
1/8 mile (1/4 mile) in less then 30 seconds.
values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
• The time and speed will continue to display until the
SELECT button is pressed.
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
• Pressing the SELECT button will clear the current run
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
and display the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run.
• Pressing the SELECT button will clear the peak force
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run,
values.
press and hold the SELECT button for five seconds.
Digital Speedometer
Instantaneous G-Force
When selected, this screen displays vehicle speed and
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
records top speed.
(lateral and longitudinal) along with a friction circle that
• Press and hold the SELECT button for three seconds to
displays the directions of the forces.
toggle between current speed and top speed.
• To reset top speed, quickly press and release the
SELECT button when top speed is displayed.
4
312
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
available information displays, then press SELECT to
display any one of the following choices.
• Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Trans Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Messages #
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
This feature shows the number of stored warning messages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Press
and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more
than one message to step through the remaining stored
messages. Pressing the BACK button takes you back to
the Main Menu.
Turn Menu OFF
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Pressing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pressing
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the
menu back.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
313
Tire PSI
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
PSI” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the following System Status messages
displays in the EVIC:
• System OK
• System Warnings Displayed (will display all currently
active System Warnings)
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current presTire Pressure Display
sure of all four road tires). For additional information,
NOTE:
refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor System” in “Starting
• Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat
And Operating”.
will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi
(14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer
to “Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pressures” in “Starting And Operating” for additional
information.
4
314
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI, NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
kPa, or BAR.
be driven several minutes before the updated temperaKeyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-N-Go
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
icon momentarily appears in the lower right corner of the
EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position. Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting And Operatneed to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
ing” for more information.
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
superseded by another display of higher priority. But also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display 360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
always re-appears.
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Compass / Temperature Display
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
315
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
4
Compass Variance Map
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
then press the SELECT button.
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
316
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance” 1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
button. The last variance zone number displays in the
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
EVIC.
then press the SELECT button.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
displayed in the EVIC.
5. Press and release the BACK button to exit.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator EVIC.
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
NOTE: For the most accurate compass performance, the indicator turns off. The compass will now function
compass variance must be set before performing the normally.
manual compass calibration. The variance should be set
for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone
map. For further information, refer to “Compass Variance.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE, is followed in three
seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
317
Italian (Italiano), German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Nederlands). Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.
Nav–Turn By Turn
When this feature is selected, the navigation system
utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destinaPress and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
displays in the EVIC.
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
following choices.
deactivated.
Select Language
Auto Unlock Doors
When in this display you may select one of five lanWhen this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français),
4
318
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
feature showing the system has been activated, or the Unlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
check-mark is removed showing the system has been matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only
deactivated.
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
Remote Unlock Sequence
grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
programmed touching the handle more than once will
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
only result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE RKE Linked To Memory
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, When this feature is selected, you can use your RKE
scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high- transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed memory
lighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a profiles. Each memory profile contains desired position
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals
(if equipped), power tilt and telescopic steering column
setting has been selected.
(if equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless EnterWhen OFF is selected, only the MEMORY switch on the
N-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to
driver’s door trim panel will recall memory profiles. To
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
319
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button a check-mark appears next to the feature showing
the system has been activated or the check-mark is
removed showing the system has been deactivated. Refer
to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the “Flash
Lamps with Lock” feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
system has been deactivated.
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on when tempera- Horn With Remote Start
tures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on. occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
These features will stay on through the duration of is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until feature showing the system has been activated or the
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the check-mark is removed showing the system has been
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed deactivated.
showing the system has been deactivated.
4
320
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then press and release the SELECT button until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected.
Headlamps With Wipers
(Available with Automatic Headlamps Only)
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
(Available with Memory Seat Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirror In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
321
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
4
322
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Auto High Beams
(Available with SmartBeam™ Only)
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
Display ECO Symbol — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/ make your selection, press and release the SELECT
Temperature display; this message can be turned on or button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
off. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
button until a check-mark appears next to the setting, is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
showing that the setting has been selected.
Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry)
information.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Wiper Mode — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated. When this feature is deactivated, the
system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper
operation.
323
Blind Spot Alert
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert.
By pressing and releasing the SELECT button once, the
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot:
Lights Only” mode. When this mode is selected the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. By pressing and
releasing the SELECT button a second time “Blind Spot:
Lights/CHM” mode is activated. In this mode the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside
mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
on. When “Blind Spot: Off” is selected the Blind Spot
When this feature is selected, the HSA system is active.
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting
And Operating” for system function and operating infor- NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
mation. To make your selection, press and release the the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
feature showing the system has been activated or the Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
check-mark is removed showing the system has been alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
deactivated.
4
324
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Forward Collision Warning
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can
be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status
of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will
warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you when you are farther away. This gives you the
most reaction time. To change the setting for more
dynamic driving select the Near setting. This warns you
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you
when you are much closer. This allows for a more
dynamic driving experience. To change FCW status press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
Park Assist System
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To
make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Refer
to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
Display Units Of Measure In:
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps (if equipped)
For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Con- can be changed between English and Metric units of
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your measure. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
325
Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
4
326
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
side of the radio faceplate.
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
Media Center 130 (RES)
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
327
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio 5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
RW/FF
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
stations without stopping, until you release it.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
TIME Button
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time AM or FM frequencies.
and radio frequency.
TUNE Control
Clock Setting Procedure
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
SCROLL control knob.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
will begin to blink.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control mid-range tones.
knob to save time change.
4
328
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
this station and press and release that button. If a button
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the front and rear speakers.
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
AM/FM Button
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
pressing the pushbutton twice.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
329
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
button number will display.
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Buttons 1 - 6
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
stations).
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
DISC Button
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
MP3 Audio Play
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
NOTE:
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
position to operate the radio.
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
4
330
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
button works in a similar manner.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
331
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 • Maximum number of files: 255
file recording media and formats are limited. When
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricnames and folder names is limited. For large numbers
tions.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
4
332
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
not play the file.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
character extension)
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
character extension)
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
VBR bit rate.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
333
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
4
334
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
335
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
ACC position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
time to turn off the radio.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Electronic Volume Control
Equipped
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
volume and to the left decreases it.
details.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
set at the same volume level as last played.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
SEEK Buttons
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next screen.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
4
336
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not knob to save time change.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
screen.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TIME Button
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
and radio frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
Clock Setting Procedure
procedure, starting at Step 2.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
337
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
4
338
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
16-Digit Character Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Program Type
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
16-Digit Character Display
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character Display
Top 40
Weather
339
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
AM/FM Button
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
SETUP Button
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between station and press and release that button. If a button is
the following items:
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
be stored into pushbutton memory.
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
4
340
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Buttons 1 - 6
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
stations).
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC/AUX Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
341
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
342
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanThe radio uses the following limits for file systems:
dom Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
343
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
display.)
not play the file.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
character extension)
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255
4
344
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
345
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilINFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time⬙ priority mode.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
4
346
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you ESN/SID Access
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posiservice that is included with the factory-installed satellite tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
347
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
form of short audio mutes.
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
cause signal blockage.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
(Satellite) Mode
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
on or above the antenna.
4
348
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an type.
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
349
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butchannel with the same selected Music Type name.
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
stored into pushbutton memory.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
SETUP Button
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
following items:
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the twice.
Sirius subscription.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
Buttons 1 - 6
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
4
350
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
iPod威 or external USB device support capability.
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate • Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
feature to control the connected device.
an option with these radios.
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
or glove compartment.
which is located in the center console or glove compartment.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
351
routed may be located in the base of the center console on
either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the center console base, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
NOTE: The center console will have a position where
the iPod威 or consumer electronic audio device cable can
be routed through without damaging the cable when
closing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to be
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
4
352
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
Using This Feature
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
USB port:
Play Mode
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play
etc.) information on the radio display.
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
USB device and display data:
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
previous track.
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
audio device)
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
Controlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
353
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five • Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
seconds.
each track in the current list and then forward to the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previTrack⬙.
ous and next tracks.
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
4
354
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
external USB device.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
355
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
4
356
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the ⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
Uconnect™ phone system.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
Next Track
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
Streaming Audio”.
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
Play Mode
music on your cellular phone.
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
Previous Track
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™
previous track music on your cellular phone.
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
and played.
current song that is playing will display info.
Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT™ MULTIMEDIA VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF EQUIPPED
Getting Started
• Screen located in the overhead console : Unfold the
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on the
overhead console behind the screen.
357
• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position,
turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume
Control knob.
• When the Video Screen are open and a DVD is inserted
into the radio, the screen turns on automatically, the
headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Single Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES)™.
• The Remote Control
• The Touch-Screen Radio (If Equipped)
Play A DVD
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
Overhead Video Screen
4
358
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Or
Press the LOAD button then corresponding number (1–6)
where the DVD is to be loaded (Non-Touch-Screen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
playing the first track.
3. Ensure the VES™ Remote Control and the Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
NOTE: The VES™ system will retain the last setting
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight DISC by when turned off.
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by reUsing The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
peatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
on the Remote Control.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list appears on the right side of the
screen, touch the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear
VES Controls screen.
359
NOTE: The “1” and “2” soft-keys are displayed for the
headphone channels. Touch 1 or 2 based on which
channel you want to change, select the new mode from
the available list on the right. Modes that are unavailable
are greyed-out.
4
Rear VES Soft-key
3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in the
MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key at
the top left of the screen.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And
DISC In The MEDIA Column
360
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Play Video Games
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC input jacks located on the back of the center console.
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play,
Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
corner will turn off the remote control screen
functions.
1. Video In – Yellow
2. Left Audio In – White
3. Right Audio In – Red
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
361
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
4
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX
1, by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER
on the Remote Control.
Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen
362
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
3. Touch the 1 or 2 based on the headphone channel you
want to change. To exit press the back arrow soft-key at
the top of the screen.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And
AUX 1 In The VES Column
Rear VES Soft-key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
363
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight the
desired audio source or repeatedly press the MODE
button on the remote until the desired audio source
appears on the screen.
4
Select FM Mode On The VES Screen
364
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
video is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES soft-key at the top left of the left screen.
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
Select Channel/Screen 2 And
HDD In The MEDIA Column
Rear VES Soft-key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Important Notes For Single Video Screen System
365
Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio
• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio 1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
simultaneously.
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
and right side equates to Channel 2.
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
• If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then
playing the first track.
Channel 2 is for audio only. Selecting a video source
(DVD) will not show the video on the screen.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch
• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
is on Channel 1.
will display on the screen and the audio could be
heard on Channel 1 in the headphones.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the Video Screen is closed
4
366
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
2. While looking at Screen 1, highlight DISC by either
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly
on the right side of the screen.
pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
367
NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key based on the channel you
tions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play,
want to change and then the DISC soft-key in the MEDIA
Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
column. To exit touch the back arrow at the top left of the
corner will turn off the remote control screen
screen.
functions.
Rear VES Soft-key
4
368
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel button
is illuminated momentarily.
Remote Control
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after five
seconds.
Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control. When
the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel
1 (right side of the screen). When the selector switch is in
the Channel 2, position the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of the screen).
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear through the current audio track or video chapter. In
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power button menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
to turn the headphone transmitter on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
369
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the disc in a radio with a multiple-disc changer, PROG Up
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to the selects the next disc and PROG Down selects the previstart of the current or previous audio track or video ous disc.
chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output
7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD for the selected channel.
disc, to select a satellite audio channel from the Station
12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press
list, or select playback modes (SCAN/RANDOM for a
play (䉴) to resume normal play.
CD).
13. STATUS – Press to display the current status.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected
9. 䡲 (Stop) – Stops disc play
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this manual
10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode, for details on changing modes.
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressing
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the
button to access the display settings (see the display
radio. When listening to compressed audio on a data
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select the
disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and PROG
menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded in the
Down selects the previous directory. When listening to a
DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode is selected
4
370
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP button to access Remote Control Storage
the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD Setup Menu of this The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the
manual.)
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
return to the previous screen. When navigating a DVDs
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s contents.
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
rewind through the current audio track or video chapter. up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the next
audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to
navigate in the menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
371
vehicle is not equipped with a DVD player, follow the
radio’s instructions to turn Video Lock on. The radio
and the video screen(s) indicate when Video Lock is
active.
• Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control
operation of the VES™.
Replacing The Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
The Remote Control Storage
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• To disable the Remote Control from making any • Replace the battery compartment cover.
changes, press the Video Lock button add follow the
radio’s instructions (select menu, rear ves, lock). If the
4
372
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
do so for themselves.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Volume Control
Power Button
Channel Selection Switch
Power Indicator
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
373
Controls
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
on the right ear cup.
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
2. Press the MODE button on the remote control.
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
as a DVD Video), pressing STATUS shows the status on a
popup banner at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the
MODE button will advance to the next mode. When the
mode is in an audio only source (such as FM), the Mode
Selection menu appears on screen.
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector 4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
switch..
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate
to the available modes and press the ENTER button to
NOTE:
select the new mode.
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned 5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
BACK button on the remote control.
4
374
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
Replacing The Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for as long as you own the Product.
operation. To replace the batteries:
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover use is defective in workmanship or materials.
downward.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
according to the polarity diagram shown.
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
Unwired姞 Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTthe initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEparticular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire- FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer- FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
able.
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
375
You may register your Unwired威 wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Shared Modes
This allows the VES™ to output radio sources to the
headphones and the radio to output VES™ sources to the
vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ channel 1 or
2 are in the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be
visible on the radio’s display for that channel, and the
shared icon will be visible on the VES™ screen. When in
shared mode, the same audio source is heard in the
shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2.
What Will Unwired威 Do? Unwired威, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired威 reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the
If you have any questions or comments regarding your radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio
Unwired威 wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293- mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is
3332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com. changed to a mode that is different from the VES™
4
376
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority Information Mode Display
over the VES™ or all radio modes (FM, AM). The VES™
has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM), SEEK, SCAN,
TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as long as it is
not in shared mode.
When in shared disc both the radio and the VES™ have
control of the video functions. The VES™ has the ability
to control the following video modes:
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
Up/Down.
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
Scan, and Track Up/Down).
Information Mode Video Screen Display
1. Channel 1 Mode
The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes
while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the 2. Channel 1 Shared Status
radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes 3. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute
on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
4. Channel 2 Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Channel 2 Shared Status
377
Numeric Keypad Menu
6. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute
7. Channel 1 ENTER Button Action
8. Channel 2 ENTER Button Action
9. Clock
4
10. Video Lock
11. Not Available / Error
12. Disc Changer Status
Numeric Keypad Menu
378
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2 Station List Menu
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s
ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This
screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency,
satellite channel, or track number. To enter the desired
digit:
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲,
䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote control’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these steps
until all digits are entered.
Channel Selection Menu For SIRIUS Backseat TV™
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote
control’s MENU button displays a list of all available
press the remote control’s ENTER button.
channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired station,
button and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
press the remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that
station. To jump through the list more quickly, navigate
to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Disc Menu
379
Display Settings
4
Disc Menu For CDs
Video Screen Display Settings
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all
commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
options you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random
play.
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, SIRIUS Backseat TV™, etc.),
pressing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen. The factory default
380
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is • Close the video screen.
no need to change these settings under normal circum• To change the current audio mode, press the remote
stances.
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select
the next available audio mode without using the Mode
To change the settings, press the remote control’s naviSelect menu.
gation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
display menu or media.
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
button.
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
player.
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the are installed in the headphones.
screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
381
DVD Audio Support
Disc Formats
The VES™ DVD player is capable of playing the followWhen a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the VES™ DVD
ing types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
notes about DVD Region Codes)
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
• DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
the disc or to another mode.
format files
Recorded Discs
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
The VES™ DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
DVD Region Codes
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
The VES™ DVD player and many DVD discs are coded CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
by geographic region. These region codes must match in also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or redisc does not match the region code for the player, the corded) are not supported.
disc will not play and will be ejected.
4
382
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the VES™ DVD player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the VES™ DVD player, check with the disc
recording software publisher for more information about
burning playable discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
closed are playable.
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD- Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
each track number is unique.
DVD player.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
supported.
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
383
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to • If you are creating your own files, the recommended
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
supported. For both formats, the recommended
these extensions for any other types of files.
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as • To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or
the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those downprevious file.
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and • To change the current directory, use the remote control’s PROG Up and Down buttons.
begin playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Disc Errors
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
player will automatically skip the file and begin playmessage is displayed on the VES™ and Radio displays
ing the next available file.
4
384
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or Display
incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a Other Language Setup
⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end
of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the
beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
first track.
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120°F. When this occurs, the DVD player
will display ⬙VES High Temp⬙ and will shut off the VES™
displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD
player.
DVD Player Language Menu
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
385
All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙ setting • When the entire four-digit code is entered, press the
to accommodate languages other than Japanese or Engremote control’s ENTER button. If the language code
lish. These languages are selected using a special fouris not valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙*⬙. If the
digit code.
digits are visible after this step, then the language code
is valid.
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup
Menu and follow these additional instructions:
Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more
language codes, please contact the dealer where the
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor butvehicle was purchased.
tons, highlight the Language item you want to edit,
Language
Code
Language
Code
and then press the remote control ENTER button.
Dutch
2311
French
1517
• Using the remote control Down cursor button, select
German
1304
Italian
1819
the ⬙Other⬙ setting, then press the remote control’s
Portuguese 2519
Spanish
1418
Right cursor button to begin editing the setting.
Rating and Password Setup
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons, select a digit for the current position. After The Rating and Password settings work together to
selecting the digit, press the remote control’s Right control the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most
cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit DVD-Video discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to
selection sequence for all four digits.
4
386
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
them where lower numbers are designated for all audi- The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a
ences and higher numbers are designated for more adult password) and the default password is 0000.
audiences.
When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared
to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc
is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen
is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passenger must enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc.
Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible
that discs designed for adult audiences can still play
without requiring a password.
DVD Password Entry
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
387
To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • After the four-digit password is entered, press the
follow these additional instructions:
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
• Using the remote control Left and Right cursor buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button.
4
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the
value for the current digit, and then press the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit.
Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is
correct, the set password screen is displayed.
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons to set the value for the current digit and the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select digits,
enter the new password.
DVD Player Level Menu
388
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
follow these additional instructions:
buttons, select the new rating level, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
• Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor
buttons, select the Rating tab.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technol• Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then press the remote
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intelleccontrol’s ENTER button.
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherthe value for the current digit, and then press the wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
remote control’s Right cursor button to select the next disassembly is prohibited.
digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four
Dolby威 Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
digits.
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙,
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the ⬙MLP Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right reserved.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
389
proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies delivering substantial increases in component and system effiThis system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation
ciency levels.
is subject to the following two conditions:
The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power
2. This device must accept any interference received, supply and drives a 7.3-channel playback architecture.
including interference that may cause undesired The Harman Kardon audio system offers the ability to
choose Logic 7 surround sound for any audio source. The
operation.
GreenEdge high-efficiency speaker designs ensure the
HARMAN KARDON姞 Logic7姞 HIGH
system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in dyPERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
namic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for maxiSOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
mum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifier
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED
output stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat surround
Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon audio sound processing.
system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior
sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and Logic7 multichannel surround-sound technology delivreduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes ers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seating
position This surround effect is available for audio from
any source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboard
General Information
4
390
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AUX input; and is activated through the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “DriverSelectable Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel”.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Selecting “Audio Surround” through the DSS modes
activates the Harman Kardon Logic7 multichannel
surround-sound technology in your vehicle. The “Video
Surround” mode is described under Driver-Selectable
Surround (DSS). The Video Surround Mode will only be
available for video media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or
other video media supported by the radio). Some audio
will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available in surround mode
but should be set to the center position for optimal
surround performance.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
391
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
after the current track begins to play.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
control is different depending on which mode you are in. second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
each mode.
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
Radio Operation
center button will select the next available CD in the
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
player.
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
4
392
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
precautions:
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
too high.
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
393
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
— If Equipped
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows
both driver and front passenger seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
• When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode
operation, Auto blower operation is set by using a
push button on the control unit and a comfort temperature setting by using the temperature up and
down buttons.
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience.
4
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel
1. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
comfort level desired by the driver and passenger.
into manual mode.
394
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Recirculation Control Button
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The
Press and release to change the current setting, the blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
indicator illuminates when ON.
selected.
3. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
This display shows the temperature setting for the left Provides the passenger with independent temperature
front seat occupant.
control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
4. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel, 9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
5. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection. 10. Auto Temperature Control Button
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
6. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
This display shows the temperature setting for the right
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
front seat occupant.
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
7. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the modes.
indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the
lowest blower setting. Performing this function will
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
395
15. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
16. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
12. Climate Control ON/OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
Automatic Operation
OFF
1. Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature
13. Mode Control Button
Control (ATC) Panel.
Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, BiLevel, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front
ATC to switch into manual mode.
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
14. SYNC Button
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
Press and release to control the temperature setting for
automatically maintain that comfort level.
both zones from the driver temperature control.
4
396
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is Manual Operation
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience This system offers a full complement of manual override
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to features.
function automatically.
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for temperature control will continue to operate automaticold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts cally.
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
There are seven fixed blower speeds.
comfort as quickly as possible.
Use the outer dial control to regulate
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
the amount of air forced through the
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
system in any mode you select. The
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
blower speed increases as you move
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features
the control clockwise and decreases
(SETUP)” in this section of the manual.
Blower Control when you move the control counterclockwise.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
397
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by Bi-Level Mode
adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets.
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
Auto mode.
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
Floor Mode
by selecting one of the following positions.
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. demister outlets.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
Mix Mode
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
while keeping the windshield clear.
amount of airflow from these outlets.
4
398
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window • If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected, the
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
blower will automatically default to medium-high unless
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
the blower is controlled manually.
Recirculation Control
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Air Conditioning (A/C)
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set to a cool Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air vehicle.
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
deactivate the A/C system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Floor/Defrost Mix and
Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
modes are selected.
399
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
DEFROST mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
Window Fogging
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on
will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air
direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.
Operating Tips
4
400
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Summer Operation
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
NOTE: In some cases during high temperature trailer
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
tow operation the Air Conditioning system performance
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other
may be reduced. This is to help protect the engine from
obstructions.
overheating during the high load condition.
Vacation Storage
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condia heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
401
Operating Tips Chart
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 415
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 415
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
䡵 AutoStick威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
䡵 Selec-Track™
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
5
404
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Active Damping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . 435
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 435
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 446
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 447
䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 454
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
STARTING AND OPERATING
405
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 455
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 457
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 470
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 461 䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 462
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 476
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 䡵 Vehicle Loading
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
▫ 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
5
406
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 483
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
407
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)
5
408
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go
This feature allows the driver to operUsing Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
ate the ignition switch with the push
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
START/STOP button is installed and
accelerator pedal.
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Installing And Removing The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing The Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
409
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
accelerator pedal.
position.
To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or
Removing The Button
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
button loose.
5
410
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions – With Driver’s Foot
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle Position)
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the and START. To change the ignition switch positions
button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP follow these steps.
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
• Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
PARK position, or it could roll.
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
STARTING AND OPERATING
411
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time If Engine Fails To Start
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
WARNING!
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
5
412
STARTING AND OPERATING
Clearing A Flooded Engine
(Using ENGINE START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine
(Using Fob With Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
413
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and when your foot is firmly
pressing on the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
414
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, and do not leave Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.
415
the PARK position (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift hundred miles (kilometers).
Interlock (BTSI) system that holds the shift lever in the
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
PARK position unless the brakes are applied. To move
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The shift lever (with AutoStick威 shift paddles mounted
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
on the steering wheel) provides PARK, REVERSE, NEUThe shift lever position display (located in the instrument
TRAL, and DRIVE shift positions.
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You
must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of
5
416
STARTING AND OPERATING
SPORT mode is only available in the “Selec-Track” posi- When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
tions of TRACK and SPORT.
parking brake.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick威 shift
control (refer to “AutoStick威” in this section). Pressing When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE position, or placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
(-/+), will manually select the transmission gear, and will move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaudisplay the current gear in the instrument cluster as 4, 3, tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
2, 1.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
417
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released), after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and when your foot is firmly
pressing on the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
418
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, and do not leave Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully
seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
STARTING AND OPERATING
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
419
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with engine running. The engine may be started DRIVE
in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the trans- This range should be used for most city and highway
mission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
WARNING!
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
5
420
STARTING AND OPERATING
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the “AutoStick威” mode
(refer to “AutoStick威” in this section) to select a lower
gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
SPORT
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power.
SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch on the
center console. Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for 3. Turn the engine OFF.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Restart the engine.
421
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no • the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
When to Use TOW Mode
operation.
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting ocmend that you visit your authorized dealer at your curs, select TOW mode, using the rotary switch on the
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has center console. Selecting TOW mode will improve perdiagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could formance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. Refer to
recur.
“Selec-Terrain” in “Starting And Operating” for further
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
information.
service is required.
AUTOSTICK姞
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission feature
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more
automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow- control of the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize
engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
ing conditions are present:
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
5
422
STARTING AND OPERATING
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
or the shift paddles), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
Operation
• Normally, in AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
reached. If, however, AutoStick威 is engaged while in
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick威, simply tap
the “Selec-Track” SPORT or TRACK mode, the transthe shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the DRIVE
mission will remain in the selected gear even when
position, or tap one of the steering wheel-mounted shift
maximum engine speed is reached. The transmission
paddles (+/-). Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick威 mode will
will upshift only when commanded by the driver.
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
using (+) to enter AutoStick威 mode will retain the current
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
gear. When AutoStick威 is active, the current transmission
display the current gear.
gear is displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick威
mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) • The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
is manually selected by the driver (using the shift lever,
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
STARTING AND OPERATING
423
• You can start out in first or second gear. Tapping (+) (at To disengage AutoStick威 mode, hold the shift lever to the
a stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle until “D” is
in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions. once again displayed in the instrument cluster. You can
shift in or out of the AutoStick威 mode at any time
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
of a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick威 is engaged.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
5
424
STARTING AND OPERATING
SELEC-TRACK™
Selec-Track™ consists of the following positions:
• Sport – Dry weather, on-road calibration. Performance
Description
Selec-Track™ combines the capabilities of the vehicle
based tuning that provides a rear wheel drive feel but
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
with improved handling and acceleration over a twobest performance for all terrains.
wheel drive vehicle. The customer has the option of
going to partial ESC. The active suspension system
will be in Semi Firm mode, and a green flag will light
up in the instrument cluster. The transmission will
provide a more aggressive shifting pattern (Refer to
“AutoStick威” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information). This feature will reset to AUTO on an
ignition cycle.
Selec-Track™ Switch
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
such as snow. When in Snow mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission may
use second gear (rather than first gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles. The active suspension system will be in
Touring Mode.
• Track – Track road calibration for use on high traction
surfaces. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some
binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The
electronic brake controls are set to Partial OFF to limit
traction control management of throttle and wheel
spin.
The transmission will be in SPORT mode and provide
a more aggressive shifting pattern. Refer to
“AutoStick威” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
425
The customer has the option of going to FULL OFF with
no interaction from the ESC System. The active suspension system will be in Full Firm mode. A green flag will
light up in the instrument cluster.
This feature will reset to AUTO on an ignition cycle.
• Tow – Use this mode for towing. Vehicle suspension
will go to Firm mode and peak power will be limited
in the engine controls. Trailer sway control is enabled
in the ESC system. The terrain switch will remain in
this position through an ignition cycle until the customer cycles into another position.
5
426
STARTING AND OPERATING
Active Damping System
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled
damping system. This system reduces body roll and pitch
in many driving situations including cornering, acceleration and braking. There are 3 modes:
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
• Touring Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO
and SNOW) — Used during highway speeds where a
touring suspension feel is desired.
CAUTION!
• Firm Mode (Available in terrain positions SPORT and
TOW) — Provides a firm suspension for better handling.
• Full Firm (Available in TRACK mode) — Provides a
full firm suspension for an aggressive track
experience.
• Due to lower ground clearance, driving your vehicle up steep driveways, approach ramps or near
parking blocks may cause damage to the front
fascia and ground effects.
• Driving through snow more than 4 inches
(100 mm) deep may cause damage to the front
fascia and ground effects.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
427
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water, and if there are any obstacles
in the way, before driving through the standing
water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
5
428
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING
429
POWER STEERING
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steerThe standard power steering system will give you good
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
steering capability if power assist is lost.
does not in any way damage the steering system.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
5
430
STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
431
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
432
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, and do not leave Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC).
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
433
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
Traction Control System (TCS)
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
5
434
STARTING AND OPERATING
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section for further information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift
will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
435
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or This system enhances directional control and stability of
other vehicles.
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
5
436
STARTING AND OPERATING
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En- Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
maintain the desired path.
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
WARNING!
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot preundersteer condition.
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent colappropriate for the steering wheel position.
lisions, including those resulting from excessive
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lodangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
safety or the safety of others.
as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
The ESC system has three available operating modes.
STARTING AND OPERATING
437
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
5
ESC OFF Switch
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
438
STARTING AND OPERATING
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momen- “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Untarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily press the “ESC
while the vehicle is in motion.
Off” switch.
Full Off
This mode is available in TRACK mode only. Refer to NOTE: The ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display and the
“Selec-Terrain” in “Starting And Operating” for further audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
information. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability into the PARK position from any position other than
features are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
press and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds will occur when the message was previously cleared.
while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running.
WARNING!
After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate,
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
and the ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display in the vehicle
reduction and stability features are cancelled. Thereodometer. Press and release the TRIP ODOMETER butfore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
ton located on the instrument cluster to clear this mesunavailable.
sage. The “ESC OFF” message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
NOTE: When the ESC is switched OFF, a feature of the
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
STARTING AND OPERATING
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the
“ESC Off” switch.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full
Off” ESC mode is intended for off-highway or offroad only.
439
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
5
440
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should turn off with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING
441
NOTE:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
Tire Markings
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
5
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
442
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaletters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall precedtion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European • Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempodesign standards. Tires designed to this standard have
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Exsize designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING
443
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
444
STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
445
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
446
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
447
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
5
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
448
STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occugross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
on your vehicle’s placard.
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
STARTING AND OPERATING
449
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pascargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
NOTE:
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
• The following table shows examples on how to calcucargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
[295 kg]).
• For the following example, the combined weight of
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
(392 kg).
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
5
450
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
451
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
452
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel
consumption.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage it.
453
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
outside temperature condition.
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres- build-up, or your tire pressure will be too low.
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
5
454
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial-Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaways use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
WARNING!
authorized dealer for radial tire repairs.
High speed driving with your vehicle at or above
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING
455
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
CAUTION!
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
pattern.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipcompact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempothe Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo80D18 103M.
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
5
456
STARTING AND OPERATING
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip- Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time
WARNING!
NOTE: The compact spare tire is to be used for rear
wheel(s) only. For a flat front tire, move the rear tire to the
front and use the compact spare on the rear. Do not tow
a trailer when using the compact spare tire.
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
NOTE: The spare tire is to be used for rear wheel(s) only.
For a flat front tire, move the rear tire to the front and use
the spare on the rear. Do not tow a trailer when using the
spare tire.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
457
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
5
458
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the
speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
to help you in determining when your tires should be grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
replaced.
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
STARTING AND OPERATING
459
Life Of Tire
Replacement Tires
The service life of a tire is dependent upon various The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
factors including but not limited to:
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu• Driving style
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva• Tire pressure
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
• Distance driven
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
WARNING!
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. Information section of this manual for more information
You could lose control and have an collision resulting relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
in serious injury or death.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
those of the original wheels.
5
460
STARTING AND OPERATING
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
461
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
5
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
Tire Rotation
462
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has
been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off. The
system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still
be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value.
463
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
5
464
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
the tire.
failure or condition.
Premium System
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
while adjusting your tire pressure.
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
readings to the Receiver Module.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
stopping ability.
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even following components:
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
• Receiver Module
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Light.
STARTING AND OPERATING
465
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated, when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages
(Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for a
minimum of five seconds, and a graphic display of the
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
5
466
STARTING AND OPERATING
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
STARTING AND OPERATING
467
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is then followed by a
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by graphic display, with pressure values still shown. This
indicates the pressure values are still being received from
any of the following:
the TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
correct vehicle position. However, the system still needs
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
to be serviced as long as the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
sensors.
message exists.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in
that affects radio wave signals.
the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel tire pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
housings.
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pres4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
sure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. will sound, and the EVIC will still display a “flashing”
pressure value in the graphic display. After driving the
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and
fault is detected possibly related to the trigger compooff for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
nent an incorrect sensor location fault. In this case, the
5
468
STARTING AND OPERATING
the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value. For each subsequent ignition
switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display
a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value. Once you repair or replace the original road tire,
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRXC4W4MA4
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2546A-C4W4MA4
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
6.4L Engine
469
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
The 6.4L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or
Reformulated Gasoline
higher.
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline.”
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spehigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imrequired. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
prove air quality.
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will probefore considering service for the vehicle.
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
5
470
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or E-85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E-85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
STARTING AND OPERATING
471
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following:
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
• change the engine oil and oil filter
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
nia reformulated gasoline.
engine controller memory
Materials Added To Fuel
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
exposure to E-85 fuel.
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
MMT In Gasoline
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is conditions and they would result in additional cost.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage fuel.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
5
472
STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
473
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate/trunk closed when driving your
vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other
poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door,
on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
(Continued)
vehicle.
5
474
STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under 2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler
the headlamp switch).
cap.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Fuel Filler Cap
STARTING AND OPERATING
475
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
5
476
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
Release Cable
2. Push down on the inboard edge of the left storage bin,
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
this will pop up the outboard edge.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
disengage snaps.
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
4. Remove the storage bin.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
5. Pull the release cable.
STARTING AND OPERATING
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
477
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry, including
the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and
This label contains the month and year of manufacture, cargo.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
included on this label and indicates the month, day, and area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
Each axle’s GAWR is determined by the components in
bottom of the label is your VIN.
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
5
478
STARTING AND OPERATING
springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components, sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability, does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Tire Size
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on Loading
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
capacity of this tire size.
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commerlisted.
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
Inflation Pressure
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
Curb Weight
the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the total
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full shifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriate
STARTING AND OPERATING
479
until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect
safely as possible.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way
the brakes operate.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
• Do not tow when the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” is illuminated. Failure to follow
this could result in loss of control and serious
injury.
• The tailpipes may be hot and you could be seriously injured if you come into contact with the
tailpipes.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
5
480
STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
you in understanding the following information:
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all rear GAWR.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temWARNING!
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
supported by the scale.
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
481
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
5
482
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Fifth Wheel/
Greater than 10,000 lbs
Gooseneck
(4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your your vehicle.
given drivetrain.
STARTING AND OPERATING
483
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
6.4L Automatic
GCWR (Gross Combined
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
Wt. Rating)
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire–Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
500 lbs (227 kg)
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
5
484
STARTING AND OPERATING
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
your trailer hitch.
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information
Placard” in “Tire Safety Information” for the maximum
combined weight of occupants and cargo for your
vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driveConsider the following items when computing the
train components the following guidelines are recomweight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
mended:
• The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
STARTING AND OPERATING
485
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
486
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer
wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements – Tires
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper
inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
487
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
(Continued)
5
488
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
Towing Tips
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, use
the AutoStick威 feature to select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
NOTE: To provide optimum towing performance and to
protect transmission components always select Trailer The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
Tow mode when towing a trailer.
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the “MainBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping tenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
traffic.
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
STARTING AND OPERATING
489
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed RECREATIONAL TOWING
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing is not allowed.
you can get back to cruising speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
CAUTION!
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
Towing this vehicle with any of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans- NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
▫ Run Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 509
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
6
492
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may wear down your battery.
from the engine cooling system.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
493
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
6
494
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” is illuminated.
Vehicle handling and braking may be reduced.
You could have a collision and be severely or
fatally injured.
• Do not tow a trailer when using the compact spare
tire.
Run Flat Tires
This vehicle is equipped with a compact spare along with
run flat tires. Although the tires are designed with a “run Jack Location
flat” feature that allows the vehicle to be driven approxi- The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
mately 50 miles (80 km) at 55 mph (88 km/h). immediate in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
service should be obtained.
NOTE: The compact spare tire is to be used fro rear
wheel(s) only. For a flat front tire, move the rear tire to the
front and use the compact spare on the rear.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
495
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
Jack Storage Location
3. Set the parking brake.
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear 4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
nut.
6
496
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Block both the front and rear of the Jacking Instructions
wheel diagonally opposite of the jackWARNING!
ing position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
wheel.
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
when the vehicle is being jacked.
the vehicle.
7. For vehicle equipped with Quadra-Lift威 refer to • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
“Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operat- • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
ing” for further information on disabling automatic
be raised.
leveling.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
497
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is still
on the ground.
6
498
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jacking Locations
Jack and Tool Assembly
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular lift
point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
499
6
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
Front Jacking Location
500
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is fully engaged.
Rear Jacking Location
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
501
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
6
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
502
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut
tightness is 110 ft lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return
it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam tray.
Stowed Spare
12. Remove the small center cap and securely store the
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
road wheel in the cargo area.
soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with the
special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m), reinstall the
jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the rear load floor
cover.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
503
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Road Tire Installation
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
nuts.
each lug nut is 110 ft/lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
6
504
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
505
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
6
506
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
507
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
6
508
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE while applying slight pressure to the accelerator. In general, the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain
the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing
the engine is most effective.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
509
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
6
510
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. Remove the rubber liner from the cupholder (located
next to the shifter on the center console).
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully remove
the shift lever override access cover, located on the
bottom of the cupholder.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
511
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all
6. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
the shift lock lever down.
7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
CAUTION!
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
• Towing this vehicle using any other method could
result in extensive damage to the transfer case
and/or transmission.
• Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
9. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover and
install the rubber liner into the cupholder.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System – OBD II . . . . . . . 516
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 516
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
7
514
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
▫ Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 556
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 548
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . 558
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 561
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
515
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Washer Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
516
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM – OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
soon as possible.
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
517
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
problem continues, the message will appear the next time system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacethe vehicle is started.
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
PROGRAMS
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
7
518
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enengine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
519
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
7
520
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding one quart of oil
when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
NOTE: Fill engine oil one quart at a time.
CAUTION!
• Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration
or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Operating the engine with the oil levels below the
safe zone, or operating with oil levels that exceed
the top of the safe zone may cause engine damage.
521
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
SAE 0W-40 engine oil or equivalent.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
This symbol means that the oil has
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
been certified by the American
whichever occurs first.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
Engine Oil Selection
API Certified engine oils.
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or
SM/CF.
7
522
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Viscosity
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adSAE 0W-40 engine oil is preferred for use in all operating
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
temperatures.
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on additives.
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine CompartDisposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
ment” in Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
information.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
523
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
maintenance intervals.
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
7
524
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
CAUTION!
• Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter
motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
• Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
WARNING!
• When temperatures are below the freezing point,
electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do
not attempt jump-starting because the battery
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. Battery temperature must be brought above
the freezing point before attempting a jump-start.
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
• Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of
the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury.
525
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
526
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres- removed. Particular attention should also be given to
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
527
When performing other underhood services, the hood Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.
7
528
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully
upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the 2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
liftgate glass.
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
529
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “Washer Fluid Low” message will be displayed. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
7
530
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, follow the preceding safety tips.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
531
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
7
532
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
533
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
Coolant Checks
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
7
534
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
535
Adding Coolant
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentracoolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
(⫺37°C ) are anticipated.
to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replace• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
period, it is important that you use the same engine
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
engine cooling system.
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main(antifreeze).
tain the proper level of protection against freezing acWhen adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威 the vehicle is operated.
Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
equivalent.
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
7
536
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
WARNING!
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by anicooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To any ground spills immediately.
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
537
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporThe radiator normally remains completely full, so there is ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing enIf an examination of your engine compartment shows no
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to • Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
7
538
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are Brake System
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
the master cylinder area before removing the cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is low, check system for leaks.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
condenser clean.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install only
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result
in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
539
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
7
540
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage
them and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axles with aluminum
housings. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with
cast iron housings.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then
and cause them to leak.
541
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. RecomSelection Of Lubricant
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
found, the transfer case fluid level can be checked by
removing the filler plug located on the back side of the
transfer case. The fluid level should be at the bottom edge
of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level
position.
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
542
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will require
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
543
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your
authorized dealer immediately. Severe damage to the
transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has
the proper tools to accurately adjust the fluid level.
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
required. For this reason the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or transmission slippage or Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geomalfunction, have your authorized dealer check the
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
transmission fluid level.
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
7
544
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
What Causes Corrosion?
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumuCorrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains, and to
protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the
paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
545
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
a month.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be kept • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorized
clear and open.
dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
vehicle.
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
Special Care
7
546
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manchrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
ner:
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
with a clean, dry towel.
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
547
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean
upholstery and carpeting.
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condiInterior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
WARNING!
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
clean vinyl upholstery.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Leather Seat Care & Cleaning
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomGlass Surfaces
mended for leather upholstery.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
7
548
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
directly on the mirror.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
FUSES
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be Totally Integrated Power Module
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp engine compartment. This center contains cartridge fuses
and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and comporag.
nent may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover
that corresponds to the following chart.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J03
30 Amp
Pink
J04
25 Amp
Natural
J05
25 Amp
Natural
J06
40 Amp
Green
Totally Integrated Power Module
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J01
40 Amp
Green
J02
30 Amp
Pink
Mini
Fuse
J07
30 Amp
Pink
Description
J08
Air Suspension
J09
Power Liftgate Module
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
Mini
Fuse
549
Description
Trailer Tow
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door Node
Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability Control System
Antilock Brakes
Valve/Stability Control System
Power Seat
E-Brake
7
550
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J10
30 Amp
Pink
J11
30 Amp
Pink
J12
30 Amp
Pink
J13
60 Amp
Yellow
J14
20 Amp
Blue
J15
40 Amp
Green
J17
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
Description
Headlamp Wash
Relay Contact
Drive Train Control
Module
Rear Defroster
Main Ignition Off
Draw (IOD)
Trailer Tow Lamps/
Park Lamps
Front Cabin Fan/
Blower
Starter Motor Solenoid
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J18
20 Amp
Blue
J19
60 Amp
Yellow
J20
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
J21
J22
M1
Mini
Fuse
Description
Powertrain Control
Module/Powertrain
Control Module
Transmission Range
Radiator Fan Motor
HI/Radiator Fan
Motor Low
Front Wiper
Front/Rear Washer
Control
Sunroof Module
15 Amp
Blue
Stop Lamps
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M2
M3
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Electronic Limit Slip
Differential/Air
Suspension
Liftgate/Headrest
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M11
M12
115V AC Power
Inverter
Cigar Lighter
M13
Power Outlet #2
(Switchable)
Front Heated Seat &
Steering Wheel
Rear Heated Seats
M15
Video/Universal
Garage Door Opener
M14
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
551
Description
Heating, Ventilation &
Air Conditioning (Climate Control System)
Radio/Amplifier
Instrument Cluster
Back Up Camera – If
Equipped
Power Seat
Module(s)/Adaptive
Cruise Control/Audio
Telematics/Daytime
Running Lights
Relay/Air Suspension
Module/Instrument
Cluster
7
552
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M16
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Stop Lamp
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M25
M26
Automatic Shutdown
1 and 2
Instrument Cluster
Automatic Shutdown
3
Horns (Low/High) –
Right
Horns (Low/High) –
Left
Rear Wiper
M27
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
M28
15 Amp
Blue
M29
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
M30
Description
Fuel Pump Motor
Output/Diesel Lift
Pump (Export Only)
Driver Door Switch
Bank
Ignition Switch/
Wireless Control
Module/Keyless
Entry Module
Powertrain
Controller/
Transmission
Controller
Tire Pressure Monitor
– If Equipped
J1962 Diag Connector
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Backup Lamps
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Powertrain
Controller/
Transmission
Controller
Park Assist Module/
Climate Control System Module/Infra
Red Sensor/Compass
Module
Left Rear Parklamps
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M36
M37
M38
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
553
Description
Power Outlet
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control
System Module
All Door Lock &
Unlock
CAUTION!
• When installing the totally integrated power module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the totally
integrated power module and possibly result in a
electrical system failure.
(Continued)
7
554
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may:
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Lights
Bulb Type
Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Grab Handle Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . VT4976
Rear Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214–2
• Remove fuse #J13 in the Totally Integrated Power
Visor Vanity Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377
Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD#1).
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) . . . . . . . 103
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Telltale/Hazard Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Lights
Bulb Type
Headlamps (Low Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11
Headlamps (High Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Headlamps (Low Beam) – High Intensity
Discharge (HID) . . . D1S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7444NA
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Aux Aperature Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 7440 (W21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W3W
Liftgate Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Turn/Stop/Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
555
BULB REPLACEMENT
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) – If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
7
556
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately
10 seconds, as the system charges.
Front Turn Signal
Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connector.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
557
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze 4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back of
front fog lamp housing.
the front fog lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in 5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
the housing.
engaged in the slots of the collar.
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
7
558
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from
lamp.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Once lower trim is loose, close the liftgate.
4. Open the flipper glass.
5. Pull up glass seal at bottom of window opening.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
6. Remove small trim panel around liftgate glass striker.
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
7. Close flipper glass and raise the liftgate.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Continue removing the trim.
12. Reinstall the socket(s)
9. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
13. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
559
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
7
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
10. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
clockwise.
11. Remove/replace bulb(s).
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
560
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear License Lamp
3. Replace bulb.
1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the 4. Reinstall lens.
snap tab to remove the license lamp lens.
2. Pull bulb from socket.
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified)
Cooling System *
6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
25 Gallons
Metric
94 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
16 Quarts
15.5 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
561
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine
oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or
SM/CF. The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic SAE
0W-40 engine oil or equivalent.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
LZTR6AP11EG (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher.
7
562
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 NV146 Transfer Case Fluid or equivalent. Usage of other fluid/
lubricants is NOT recommended.
MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (API-GL5) or
equivalent.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 565
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
564
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
S anytime a malfunction is suspected.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be discomes first.
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
565 M
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
master cylinder, and power steering and add as
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inneeded.
formation.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a At Each Oil Change
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
• Change the engine oil filter.
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or Required Maintenance Intervals
damage.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals pages for the required maintenance intervals.
as required.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 566 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
N
T 6 Months Maintenance Service
E Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
567 M
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 568 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
N
T 30 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
C ❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or
36 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
569 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 570 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
A ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
N ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
C ❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
E
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏ Inspect the accessory drive belt(s), replace if necessary.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) whichever
comes first.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
571 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 572 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or
N
T 84 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
C
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
573 M
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
102,000 miles (170 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 574 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or
N
T 108 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
C
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
575 M
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 576 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or
N
T 132 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
C
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
577 M
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 578 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
WARNING!
N
T • You can be badly injured working on or around a
E
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
N
A
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
C
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 581
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 582
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 582
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
9
580
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
581
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
582
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (877) 426–5337
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
In Mexico contact:
center.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
583
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
9
584
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
585
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov.
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
586
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
information that students and professional technicians
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vemaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
Call toll free at:
and charts.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
587
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
588
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
590
INDEX
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . 195
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 535
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,73
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,77,94,279
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,70,73
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 68,70,73
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,287
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534,560
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 393
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,542
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 252
INDEX
Auxiliary Power Outlet
591
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 25
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,94
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 91
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554,555
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,473
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115,392
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
10
592
INDEX
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,82,84,87
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,84
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327,336
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 350
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 536
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533,537
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
INDEX
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
593
. . . . . . . 534,560 Driving
. . . . . . . . . . 195
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
. . . . . . . . . . 258
. . . . . . . . . . 581 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . 305
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,398
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 252
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . 191,195
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,289
10
594
INDEX
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 517
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,93,473
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469,560
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520,560
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521,560
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 74
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,93,473,530
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,530
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
INDEX
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,281,556,558
Flipper Glass, Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 561
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,556
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . 218,300,324
595
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473,476
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469,560
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
10
596
INDEX
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477,480
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477,480
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 473,476,516
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,27,146,216,468
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 115
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
426
492
555
556
175
556
106
281
281
. 482
. 258
INDEX
597
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 236 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,314,408
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278,279 Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,314
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 Kicker Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 184 LATCH
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 83,84
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
10
598
INDEX
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,174
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,77,94,279
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 440
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,556
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555,556
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 279
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,234
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
INDEX
Service Engine Soon
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 282
Tow/Haul Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,174,556,558
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,84
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . .
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
599
. . . . . 524
. . . . . 519
. . . . . 564
. . . . . 564
. . 279,517
. . . . . 585
. . . . . 168
. . . . . 168
. . . . . 168
. . . . . 470
. . . . . 307
. . . . . 104
. . . . . 104
. . . . . 105
. . . . . 105
. . . . . 105
. . . . . 106
. . . . . 105
. . . . . 106
10
600
INDEX
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518,584
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47,70,75
68,70,73
. . . 469
. . . 281
. . . 281
. . . 304
. . . 304
. . . 520
. . . 560
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521,560
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516,517
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,492
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 5,585
INDEX
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 447
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 252
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,153
601
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245,248
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . 189
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
454
536
392
187
540
231
113
10
602
INDEX
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 390
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,93
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
INDEX
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,94
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 56
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,87
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,153
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
603
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,287
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327,336
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
10
604
INDEX
Short Message Service (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,281,556,558
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Sound System
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455,457,495
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 191,195
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,407
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,189
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,189
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Steering Wheel Mounted
Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400,554
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245,248
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 64
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
INDEX
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,189
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 393
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 287
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,189
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 447
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,451,587
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
605
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447,448
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 462
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Tow/Haul Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479,511
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
10
606
INDEX
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . 489
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,415,542
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 236
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 22
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,556,558
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 350
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
INDEX
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448,477
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400,554
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183,529
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
607
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,247,251
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet
metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This
connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only
fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure
a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
12WK742-126-AD
4th Edition
Printed in U.S.A.